2013 Dodge Durango Owner`s Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
13WD01-126-AE
Fifth Edition
Durango
Printed in U.S.A.
1588880cv1
13WD01-126-AE Durango
Chrysler 1" gutter 08/27/2013 12:27:42
2013 Durango
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
13WD01-126-AE
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Durango
COVER INCOVER IN
2013 Durango
2013
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed “Starting And Operating” for further information.
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisdriving or use in other severe conditions suited for a
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
four-wheel drive vehicle.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
INTRODUCTION 5
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- ROLLOVER WARNING
tions and recommendations in this manual will help Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech- control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about not.
your satisfaction.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
1
6 INTRODUCTION
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the Consult the following table for a description of the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or this Owner’s Manual:
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . .
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . .
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .21
. . . . . . . . . . .21
. . . . . . . . . . .22
. . . . . . . . . . .22
. . . . . . . . . . .24
. . . . . . . . . . .24
. . . . . . . . . . .24
. . . . . . . . . . .25
. . . . . . . . . . .26
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .27
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . .55
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .58
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .59
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .60
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .63 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .107
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .70
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .75
. .108
. .108
. .109
. .110
. .112
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
NOTE: With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, the Elecfeature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
Operating” for further information.
the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on
the driver’s side should the battery in the vehicle or the
RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for
locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the security alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding. Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is
dead) into the ignition switch to disarm security alarm.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
then pull the key out with your other hand.
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the
shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key
to the right slightly, then remove the Key Fob as
described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap
Emergency Key Removal
the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
and stopped, but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
you obtain service.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof
(if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this
condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob or
ignition module. Only remove the emergency key
for locking and unlocking the doors.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, opening the
driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed
in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the
reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorresult in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 secor unlocked.
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote
possible by an authorized dealer.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
CAUTION!
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The • Do not make modifications or alterations to the
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
SENTRY KEY®
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
security protection.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
Replacement Keys
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authovehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
is one that has never been programmed.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
for an additional 15 minutes.
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
• This device must accept any interference that may be one should go off in the future, you will need to know
received, including interference that may cause unde- which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
sired operation.
Rearming The System
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors, disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security rearm itself.
Alarm provides both audio and visual signals, the horn
will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
General Information
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
(RKE) transmitter.
further information).
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
To Disarm The System
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the the following methods:
key is physically removed from the ignition.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
information).
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
Vehicle Security Alarm.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tamper Alert
NOTE:
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in • The front courtesy overhead console and door couryour absence, the horn will sound three times and the
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
doors or open any door.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
ther information.
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
RKE transmitters.
system will also turn on.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Remote Unlock Sequence
Key Fob With Five-Button RKE Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your InSound Horn With Remote Key Lock
strument Panel” for further information.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
Illuminated Approach
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds feature. The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerequipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center strument Panel” for further information.
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable FeaUsing The Panic Alarm
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
further information.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
To Lock The Doors
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- headlights turn on, the park lamps will flash, the horn
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
(24 km/h) or greater.
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the
hand.
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps
and horn will remain on.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Emergency Key Removal
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Separating RKE Transmitter
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
halves together.
radios.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
following conditions:
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
maintaining security. The system has a range of
• This device must accept any interference received,
approximately
300 ft (91 m).
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
may reduce this range.
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
All of the following conditions must be met before the • Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™
engine will remote start:
vehicle
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system • For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-Nwill disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
Start request.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGo™ feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Insert Key and Turn to Run” will display in the EVIC
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
until you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push Panel”.
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push DOOR LOCKS
the START button.
Manual Door Locks
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
The power door locks can be manually locked from
When remote start is activated, the heated steering inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
remote start is activated. These features will stay on doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
2
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in
the ignition switch and the driver’s door is open, the
doors will not lock.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door Doors
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your Door Lock System
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
1. Open the rear door.
service.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for
approximately 72 hours, the Passive Entry feature for
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
Entry feature.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reto lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
sponse time.
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
NOTE:
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the theft alarm.
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Enter The Liftgate
Transmitter In Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button on the right side of
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the the chrome accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door below the liftgate glass to lock or unlock the vehicle.
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
present in the ignition.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
Liftgate Passive Entry Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button
on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
programmed in EVIC, the liftgate will unlock when you
press the button on the liftgate. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
2
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door NOTE:
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait 2 seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACCESSORY position.
2
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Auto Down Window Switches
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
To stop the window from going all the way up during the NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condithe first detent and release when you want the window to
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
stop.
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Auto Up Window Switches
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Window Lockout Button
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
press the Window Lockout button again.
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle and lift.
Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger
or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate.
2
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate
chime will be audible. For further information, refer to
“Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)/
Electronic Vehicle information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
The power liftgate may be opened by pulling
up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the
LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Press the LIFTGATE button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open
the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pressing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate. The power liftgate may also be opened and NOTE:
closed with the overhead console switch.
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
Also, the power liftgate may be closed by pressing the
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
liftgate switch located on the left rear trim, near the
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
liftgate opening. Pressing once will close the liftgate only.
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftThis button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
gate trim panel.
To operate the power liftgate manually in the open • If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
direction, pull the liftgate handle once to initiate power
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put
power liftgate functionality.
liftgate into manual mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
button to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, press
the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the
liftgate, and then press it again to close.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
manual operation.
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
meets sufficient resistance.
(0 km/h).
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the • The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
NOTE:
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button or overhead console close
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed
manually.
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperadetection of an obstruction.
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
(Continued)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired
length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in
a seat — if equipped
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Please pay close attention to the information in this
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
possible.
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
wheel
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
CHildren (LATCH).
energy during an impact event
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
• All seat belt systems (except the driver) include Autoinflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
matic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the
severity and type of collision.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
buckled up in a rear seat.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltvehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
between you and the door.
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Latch Plate
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt.
A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retracThe belt will automatically retract to its stowed positor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
2
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second Row
— Captains
Chair
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
Center
CRS Lock
N/A
N/A
Passenger
CRS Lock
ALR
ALR
ALR
ALR
ALR
N/A
ALR
ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
the entire belt is extracted.
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prenow in the Automatic Locking Mode.
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Refurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severwhether the severity, or type of rear impact will require ity and type of the impact.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
2
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
AHR In Reset Position
NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
into the back decorative plastic half.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authoReminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire deactivating BeltAlert®.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuBeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for air bags, are located above the side windows and their
Advanced Air Bags.
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- • Instrument Panel
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
• Knee Impact Bolster
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
the outboard side of the front seats.
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
authorized dealer immediately.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Air Bag System Components
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
• Air Bag Warning Light
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
• Steering Wheel and Column
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
bag only.
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require side air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colliThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
required for this vehicle.
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
severe initial deceleration.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on type of collision.
several factors, including the severity and type of impact.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, have deployed.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity SABIC air bags, and driver/passenger knee air bags may
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
events.
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about onequarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with Enhanced Accident Response System
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
event the ORC will determine whether to have the NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- SABIC - if equipped air bags may deploy on both sides of
the vehicle.
ing functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
until the ignition key is turned off.
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
removed.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
immediately.
If A Deployment Occurs
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the Maintaining Your Air Bag System
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
WARNING!
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on • Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inbe injured if the air bag system is not there to
structions for cleaning.
protect you. Do not modify the components or
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have dewiring, including adding any kind of badges or
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
bags will not be in place to protect you.
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
WARNING!
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im(Continued)
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Child Restraints
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
(Continued)
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit pericomfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Captains Chairs Second Row
60/40 Second Row
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and
tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center
position only.
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
60/40 Seat LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted
floor panel away from the seat back, this will expose the
top tether strap anchorages.
2
Captains Chair LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat. To access the top tether
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Second Row Captains
Chairs
WARNING!
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuLATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the upward position.
the LATCH system. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to 1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
install a child seat in the center seating position.
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat LATCH — Second Row 60/40
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
seat backing.
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
Improper installation of a child restraint to the be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed. retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description unInstalling Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
Belt
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of types of seat belts.
WARNING!
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle
2
Captains Chairs Second Row
60/40 Second Row
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes, center position only.
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
“click.”
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction.
path.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position (see the charts above), move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
Top Tether Strap Mounting (60/40 Seat)
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage — Center Seating Position
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
For center seating position route the tether strap over the
seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
anchor located on the back of the seat.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriTransporting Pets
mental and should be avoided.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
a collision.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer SAFETY TIPS
to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your VeTransporting Passengers
hicle”.
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Defroster
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopercollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
able.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt Floor Mat Safety Information
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
The light should come on and remain on for
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Air Bag Warning Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .121
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . .125
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
䡵 Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
Rearward Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .164
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .172
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Rear Captain Chairs — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .188
▫ Folding Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .193
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .199
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .202
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . .202
▫ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .204
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Ambient Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .210
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .214 䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .215
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .224
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .225
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .254
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .231
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .234
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .235
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .238
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .242
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped. . . .244
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .256
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .261
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .263
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .265
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .269
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .276
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .272 䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .281
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Cargo Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Front Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Rear Full Center Console (If Equipped) . . . . . .288
▫ Rear Mini Center Console (If Equipped) . . . . .291
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .297
▫ Deploying the Crossbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Stowing the Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Outside
Mirrors
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The mirror is twisted on the
windshield button counterclockwise and requires no
tools for mounting.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• full forward
• full rearward and
• normal.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
3
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles may
not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case
the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
Rear Detection Zones
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
3
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Modes Of Operation
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deBlind Spot Alert
tected object are present on the same side at the same
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when muted.
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected NOTE:
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
the radio is muted.
system, the radio is also muted.
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailableAstronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”,
When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
supported phones.
Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
For Uconnect® Customer Support: U.S. residents - visit phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400. Cana- available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
dian Residents - visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call,
1-800-465–2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
WARNING!
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
Uconnect® Phone Button
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
(Uconnect® Phone
button and Voice Compurse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
mand
button)
that
will enable you to
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone.
access
the
system.
When
you
press
the button you will
The Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to
hear
the
word
Uconnect®
followed
by
a BEEP. The beep
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
is your signal to give a command.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command Button
Operation
Actual button location may vary with the Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
radio. The individual buttons are described in Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
the “Operation” section.
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
details.
prompt.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth® Device”.
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Voice Command Tree
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few
instances the system will take you back to the previous
menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® webIf you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
Help Command
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions:
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
and follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identiand priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial By Saying A Number
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
• Press the
button to begin.
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the
button to begin.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
“Call”.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
person you want to call.
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previby Saying a Name” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
to the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button to begin.
• Press the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomphone is accessible.
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
instead of “Bob”.
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
NOTE:
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
book entry, if desired.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
phonebook entry that you are adding.
deleted or edited.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more • Press the
button to begin.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
entry that you wish to edit.
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
phonebook entry that you are editing.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
to the main menu.
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
from the list, press the
button while the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and say
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Delete”.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
Entry” feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
button to begin.
• Press the
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete”.
deleted or edited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
but“Phonebook Erase All”.
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you
“Call”.
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
operations at this point.
deleted.
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
number designation you wish to call.
is deleted.
• The selected number will be dialed.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
Phone Call Features
deleted or edited.
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
• Press the
button to begin.
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
“Phonebook List Names”.
List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- Progress
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
button until you hear a single
call, press and hold the
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
butbring the call back from hold, press and hold the
ton until you hear a single beep.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), one conference call.
press the
button until you hear a single beep, indicatCall Termination
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
butswitched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
ton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
Conference Call
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
double beep indicating that the two calls have been phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
joined into one conference call.
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• After the ignition key is cycled to OFF, a call can
“Redial”.
continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
from the Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the • An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect® Phone.
Call Continuation
Uconnect® Phone Features
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Language Selection
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is using:
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail• Press the
button to begin.
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
English, Espanol, or Francais.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
language selection.
follows:
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
• Press the
button to begin.
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonethe paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
book is usable. The paired phone name is not languageThis feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
specific and is usable across all languages.
Mexico.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
number for your area.
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
reachable:
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Roadside Assistance”.
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528for the mobile phone directly.
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
WARNING!
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside
Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in the WarTo use you Uconnect® Phone System in an emerranty Information Booklet and the Roadside Assisgency, your mobile phone must be:
tance references.
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• and have network coverage.
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
Roadside Assistance
“Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”.
If you need roadside assistance:
Paging
• Press the
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
Voice Mail Calling
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”.
can press the
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by
with Automated Systems”.
“Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
Working With Automated Systems
to leave a number on a pager.
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
navigating through an automated telephone system.
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system or an automated service, such as a paging service system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
or automated customer service line. Some services re- say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
quire immediate response selection. In some instances, The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone. phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
network configurations. This is normal.
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
button to begin.
out settings that are too short and may not allow the • Press the
use of this feature.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
one of the following:
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones”.
button
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
and say “Transfer Call”.
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
being announced, press the
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
button and say “Select”
or
“Delete”.
Also,
see
the
next
two sections for an
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
alternate
way
to
“Select”
or
“Delete”
a paired phone.
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
Select Another Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® This feature allows you to select and start using another
connection between your mobile phone and the phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions debutton to begin.
• Press the
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• Press the
button to begin.
button at any time while the
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
you wish to select.
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
• Press the
button to begin.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
prompts.
button at any time while the From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone you radio mode):
wish to delete.
button for five seconds until
• Press and hold the
the session begins, or,
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
button and say the “Voice Training”, This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
• Press the
“System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” com- and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
mand.
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
best results, the Voice Training session should be comconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
you.
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
• Press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
Far End Audio Performance
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is • Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• low road noise,
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• smooth road surface,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
SMS
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Read Messages:
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
not the Uconnect® Phone.
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
If you wish to hear the new message:
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Press the
button.
compromised with the convertible top down.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Recent Calls
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down- • Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
load”, Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incomyou.
ing and Missed Calls.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Send Messages:
3. Where are you?
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send 4.
a new message:
5.
button.
• Press the
6.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
7.
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
8.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
9.
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
I need more direction.
LOL
Why
I love you
Call me
button while the 10.
To send a message, press the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
11.
Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
12.
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
13.
List of Preset Messages:
14.
1. Yes
15.
2. No
Call me later
Thanks
See You in 15 minutes
I am on my way
I’ll be late
Are you there yet?
Where are we meeting?
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
16. Can this wait?
Bluetooth® Communication Link
17. Bye for now
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
the system from announcing the new incoming mes- must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
sages.
system.
button.
• Press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disc player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB Mass Storage Class device, iPod family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys• This device must accept any interference received,
tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
button, you These commands are universal and can be used from any
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
command.
the active application.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.
options.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
button, listen for set to low.
options, press the Voice Command
the beep, and say your command.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menu
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
Commands
main menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all In this mode, you can say the following commands:
times. Local commands are available if the supported
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing The Volume
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth® Streaming mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Radio AM
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Disc Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands:
“Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo Mode
USB Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying
one of the following commands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
– “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
Name, Track Name, etc.)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may press the Voice Combutton to stop playing memos. You promand
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Main menu setup” or
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Tutorial”
Setup
• “Voice Training”
• “Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
button first and wait for the beep before
Command
following:
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to system setup”
Voice Training
• “Main menu system setup”
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog• “Switch to system setup”
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
• “Change to setup”
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
SEATS
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
vehicle.
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
support.
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
Power Lumbar Switch
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted for- position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
ward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of
have latched.
the seat cushion, near the floor.
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions.
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
WARNING!
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
Your Vehicle” for further information.
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
Front Heated Seats
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
controls for each heater are located near the bottom within two to five minutes.
center of the instrument panel (below the climate con- When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
trols).
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
within two to five minutes.
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will in higher ambient temperatures.
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, driver and passenger to operate the seats independently.
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting Sysbank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just tem — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
below the climate controls.
The ventilated seat switches are used
to control the speed of the fans located
in the seat. Press the switch once to
choose HIGH, press it a second time to
choose LOW. Pressing the switch a
third time will turn the ventilated seat
OFF. When HIGH speed is selected
both lights on the switch will be illuminated. When LOW
speed is selected one light will be illuminated.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compobutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
downward on the head restraint.
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
Push Button
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
60/40 Split Rear Seat
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row Fold-Flat
head restraints can be folded using a switch, located on
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
the instrument panels switch bank.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
Press the power folding switch located
side of the seat.
on the instrument panel to fold the
head restraints.
NOTE:
• The head restraints can only be folded downward using
the power folding switch. The head restraints must be
raised manually when occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
Release Lever
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat Second Row Seat
Release Lever
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Easy Access For Third Row
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
Tumble Strap
Tumbled Second Row
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
(Continued)
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
To Raise Rear Seat
Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place.
Rear Captain Chairs — If Equipped
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
Release Lever
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Easy Access For Third Row
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console there is
a stepping pad to allow passengers to easily access the
third row seats.
Tumble Strap
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
To Raise Rear Seat
Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Mini Console Stepping Pad
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat pull on the release handle
located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the
pull strap located next to the release handle.
Third Row Folded
NOTE: The second row seats must be in their full
upright position, or tumbled when folding the third row
seats.
Release Handles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
located on the back of the seat.
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
WARNING!
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steerposition the seat will not provide the proper stability ing column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same posilatched seat could cause serious injury.
tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Memory Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Programming The Memory Feature
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the 1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the ignition switch
to the ON/RUN position.
following:
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- 3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column 4. Within 5 seconds, press and release either of the
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
memory position has been set.
switch.
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
memory position has been set.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Remote Linked to Memory” feature
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
(EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
memory profile.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under• The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle To program your RKE transmitters, perform the followInformation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle ing:
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” 1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
for further information.
Enter-N-Go).
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE:
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release Driver One Memory Position Recall
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
memory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 on
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
the memory switch.
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
transmitter within 10 seconds.
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
memory settings by following steps 1-4 above and pressing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE • To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on
transmitter in Step 4.
the memory switch.
Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a
recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s mirror and
the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or
RUN position.
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move to a
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in
(22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move about
or Easy Entry.
2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
3
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Safety Latch Location
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
further information.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automatiWhen the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
section for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headNOTE: When your headlights come on during the daylights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
time, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in this
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it section for further information.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
also has this customer-programmable feature. When SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
lighting at night by automating high beam control
the wiper system is on. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe- 2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE:
• If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is replaced, NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
To Deactivate
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to 1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, etc.) on the
operation of low beams).
windshield or camera lens will cause the system to
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
function improperly.
reactivate the system.
To Activate
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Undernot in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be Parking Lights And Panel Lights
used for normal nighttime driving.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
To
turn
off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
back
to
the O (Off) position.
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is Fog Lights — If Equipped
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
Headlight Delay
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position, or if equipped, when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
Fog Light Operation
way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way
up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
Dimmer Control
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
ON.
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
Front Map/Reading Lights
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over- UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
head console.
pressed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilsecond time.
ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
steering column.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
CAUTION! (Continued)
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
(Continued)
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
Windshield Washer Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
cycles, then turn off.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
WARNING!
3
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Mist Control
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
windshield.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings • A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
to activate this feature.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandsensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensiing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the following conditions:
OFF position when not using the system.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
NOTE:
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temwiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps steering wheel to operate.
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
Your Vehicle” for further information.
warm.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
WARNING!
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
3
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 — ON/OFF
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph 4 — CANCEL
(32 km/h).
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Accelerate For Passing
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inPress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
speed will be established.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph vehicle set speed.
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the
vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
18 mph (30 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
DISTANCE SETTING
RES +
SET CANCEL
ON/OFF
MODE
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
3
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
ACC Set
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- To Cancel
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the
speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if:
accelerator pedal.
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• The speed of the vehicle goes below 15 mph (25 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
Driver Override
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off,
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
To Resume Speed
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
last set speed.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of
18 mph (30 km/h).
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• You push the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to in- NOTE:
crease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the button is
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
display.
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
will automatically slow the vehicle.
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
vehicle to a complete stop.
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to de- • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
crease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the button is
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downEVIC display.
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between 3 (long),
2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting
and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting
displays in the EVIC.
3
Distance Setting 3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 2
Distance Setting 1
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
setting adjusts between long, medium, and short.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi- The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; howcator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto- ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of necessary.
the set speed.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
ACC system applies the brakes.
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
speed.
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
the sensor.
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead.
itself.
• The distance setting is changed.
The ACC Systems provides Overtake Aid when passing
on the left hand side only. When driving with ACC
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on engaged and following a Target vehicle, the system will
ACC Activation).
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
provide an additional acceleration based on your current cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
speed. The acceleration is triggered by indicating a left information it displays depends on ACC system status.
turn signal.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
– When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
– When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
ACC SET
Brake Alert
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
– When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
– The set speed will continue to display in place of the
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
while ACC is set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
• Set Speed Change
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
• Distance Setting Change
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
• System Cancel
Example Only
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
Clean Radar Sensor Warning
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- NOTE:
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• If the “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
the sensor lens.
authorized dealer.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterrequire a sensor realignment.
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
• If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
ACC operation.
authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC Unavailable Warning
Precautions While Driving With ACC
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
Service ACC Warning
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/ performance does not return to normal after removing
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
Offset Driving
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
checked by an authorized dealer.
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
3
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
3
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
To change between the different cruise modes, press the
MODE button when the system is in either the OFF,
READY or SET state. Pressing of the MODE button in any
state will result in changing to the new Mode in the OFF
state.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Vary The Speed Setting
There are two ways to change the set speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
desired speed and press the SET - button.
• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respectively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph
(8 km/h) increments.
To Cancel
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
erasing the memory if:
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
• You press the CANCEL button.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Syschanging speed, not the speedometer.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set the driver with audible and visual warnings (within the
speed.
EVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough
To Turn Off
time to react and avoid the potential collision.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
memory if:
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
• You push the Normal Fixed Speed ON/OFF button.
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
• You turn off the ignition.
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
• When entering or driving in a curve, the FCW alerts
may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as
guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
WARNING!
FCW Message
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph
(16 km/h).
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will be
displayed in the EVIC.
FCW settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in
PARK.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
Example Only
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
gives you the most reaction time.
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
3
Example Only
Example Only
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system NOTE: In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in the EVIC.
in front of you.
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the unavailable screens.
FCW Unavailable Warning
FCW Off Example
NOTE:
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
Service FCW Warning
driver after ignition shut down.
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over- FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system above. A display warning will appear in the EVIC
indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating
checked by an authorized dealer.
speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
EQUIPPED
6 mph (9 km/h).
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual ParkSense® Sensors
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in
recommendations.
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or direction, depending on the location, type and orientadisabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is tion of the obstacle.
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® Warning Display
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
3
Park Assist System OFF
Park Assist System ON
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
Continuous Tone
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Mute
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will MUTE the radio, if on, when the approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
system is sounding an audio tone.
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
ParkSense® switch.
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
NOTE: The ParkSense® system will automatically disable when the system detects that a trailer with trailer
brakes has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake
Module. The EVIC will display “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in reverse.
and the system has detected a faulted condition, the
EVIC will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
will not operate.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or defective. The ParkSense® If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
System
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
When the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System is mal- the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single authorized dealer.
chime, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILIf “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
NOTE:
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operFailure to do so can result in the system not working
ating properly.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
fascia/bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Fur- • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
thermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
key.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the EVIC .
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
5. Press the “save” soft-key.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
3
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
Opener (HomeLink®), power liftgate and power sunroof can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
switches may also be included, if equipped.
visibility.
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Sunglasses Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manuposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
indicator flashes.
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
activates, programming is complete.
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- follow these steps:
mitter button.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
not release the button.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
remaining steps.
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
view.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
several seconds of transmission.
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigsuccessfully accepted the frequency signal. The indinals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transcator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
fully trained.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
time-out in the same manner.
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
door may open and close while you are programming.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Using HomeLink®
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Security
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
programming, plug it back in at this time.
used at any time.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
follow these steps:
in your vehicle.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
erased.
not release the button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key in the ignition switch (or leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Venting Sunroof — Express
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
Sunshade Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Wind Buffeting
Ignition OFF Operation
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
Sunroof Maintenance
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
Sunroof Fully Closed
the glass panel.
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power • All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
discharge.
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob and
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
element must be used.
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
to the battery and powered at all times.
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
3
Front Power Outlet
Front Center Console Outlet
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center console, The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
there is also a power outlet located in the lower storage cargo area.
area of the rear full center console.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be switched to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
3
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Front Console
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
3
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed, there
will be a delay of approximately one second before the
inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of
the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is
producing AC power.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
CUPHOLDERS
Rear Cupholders
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the fold-down center armrest.
located in the center console.
3
Front Cupholder Location
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear full console cupholders are equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
located in the front of the rear full console.
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Full Console Cupholders — If Equipped
Rear Full Console Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Full Console Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Rear Mini Console Cupholders — If Equipped
STORAGE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers Glove Compartment
located in the front of the rear mini console.
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
3
Rear Mini Console Cupholders
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the
latch and lower the glove box door.
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
Front Center Console
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy The front center console contains both an upper and a
access.
lower storage area.
Door Panel Storage
Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
the small latch located on the lid.
lower storage compartment.
3
Storage Compartment Latches
Lower Storage Compartment
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Full Center Console (If Equipped)
The rear full center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
Upper Storage Compartment
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Storage Compartment
NOTE: Lower storage compartment light is always on
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on with ignition in the ON/RUN position.
the small latch located on the front of the lid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
CAUTION! (Continued)
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is
lifted forward.
3
Lower Storage Compartment
The upper storage compartment may also be lifted forward.
Push in the release button located on the back of the lid.
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders
or devices with cords routing through upper storage
(Continued)
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When lifted forward there is access to the lower storage NOTE: When the lower storage compartment is accessed
compartment.
it allows the armrest to flip forward for “fold flat mode”.
Fold flat mode allows the console armrest to be lowered
below fold flat seat plane and protect the armrest vinyl
from damage when using the vehicle to haul cargo.
Lower Storage Compartment
Fold Flat Mode
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable liners,
are located rearward of the cupholders and in the lower
front of the console.
3
Console Cubby Bin
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Console Cubby Bins
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable liner, needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
is located in the front of the console.
Rear Mini Center Console (If Equipped)
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Three-Press Switch
Cargo Storage
Press And Release
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side
of the rear cargo area.
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
the pillar trim cover.
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
place.
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
3
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more
will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if rear window defroster automatically turns off after apthe switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
switch is released the pump will resume normal opera- operation, press the button a second time.
tion.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned window defroster only when the engine is operating.
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
3
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Deploying the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar.
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
Thumb Screw
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by sliding
the crossbar towards the center of the roof. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot supports
at each end.
Removing Crossbars
Bending Pivot
3
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as far
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in place,
tighten both thumb screws completely.
the side rail.
Positioning Crossbars
Installing Crossbars
Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
it towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure the deployment of the crossbars.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot supports at each end.
Deployed Crossbars
Stowing the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
Crossbar Pivot
3
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Stowing Crossbars
Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the
roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
3
Tightening Crossbar
Stowed Crossbars
Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the NOTE:
opposite side.
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception.
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumbwheels frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .336
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .313
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .340
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .363
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . .
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . .
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD
䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/
and MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . .
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .355
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
And MP3 Audio Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
.364
.364
.370
.372
.375
.375
.376
.376
.380
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1. . . . . .395
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio . . .397
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ VES™ Remote Control – If Equipped . . . . . . .400
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
䡵 Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .403
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .406
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Rear Climate Control — If Equipped . . . . . . .433
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Vacation Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin
9 — ESC Off Switch
10 — Ignition Switch
11 — Headlight Switch
12 — Hood Release
13 — Fuel Door Release
14 — Dimmer Control
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi1. Tachometer
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
(RPM x 1000).
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should low tire pressure telltale.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
tires.)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subseCAUTION! (Continued)
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operatem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure tion or sensor damage may result when using reas intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety placement equipment that is not of the same size,
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
to continue to function properly.
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission conCAUTION!
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
warning have been established for the tire size ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system. If this light remains on after several ignition 5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles Light — If Equipped
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conyour authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
trol (ESC) is off.
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
6. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop is not functioning and that service is required. However,
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
caused the ESC activation.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have for a defective outside light bulb.
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
10. High Beam Indicator
7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steerlights are on.
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
8. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
11. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Red
Telltale Area
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)”.
9. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone
will chime, and an EVIC message will appear if either
turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display/Odometer Display
13. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) White
Telltale Area
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require
that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify
to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has
been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or
serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer
reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If
s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a
good idea for you to make a record of the odometer
reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure
that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is
accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white
telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic
vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
14. 4 LOW — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
15. Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the
4WD Lock switch is activated and the transmission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
position (Off-Road Mode).
16. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
17. Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
19. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
20. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
18. Fuel Gauge
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when Your Vehicle.”
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
This light will turn on when a ACC has been
SET. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
22. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
24. Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
25. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Amber
Telltale Area
This light will turn on when a ACC is ON. For
further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea- caution telltales. For further information, refer to “Electures Of Your Vehicle.”
tronic vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
23. Electronic Speed Control Light SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
26. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
27. Brake Warning Light
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
28. TOW/HAUL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
The TOW HAUL button is located on the center
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
stack upper switch bank. This light will illumiDistribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
nate when TOW HAUL mode is selected
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
29. Seat Belt Reminder Light
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
30. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
instrument cluster.
• Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
• DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and
sub-menus.
• SELECT Button
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
• UP Button
Press and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
ACC (if equipped), Vehicle Speed, Trip Info,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Messages, Units, System
Setup, Turn Menu Off) and sub-menus.
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu. Hold the select
button to use the RESET function. For example,
while in the Fuel Economy page, hold and release the
select button to reset the AVG.
• BACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub-menu.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
and outside temperature are displayed.
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up reviewed from the “Messages”main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
messages are displayed.
the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odommessage type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
eter line.
and “Low Tire Pressure”.
The main display area will normally display the main
• Unstored Messages
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up” This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
into several categories:
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition • Vehicle Not in Park
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
• Key Left Vehicle
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Key Not Detected
• Five Second Unstored Messages
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of • Premium TPM System Graphic Display
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex- • Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And Operating”)
amples of this message type are “Memory System Unavailable - Not in Park” and “Automatic High Beams • Service Keyless System (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
On”.
Passive Entry - if equipped)
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the • Service Park Assist System
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
• Park Assist System Blinded
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Keyfob Battery Low
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Left front turn signal lamp out
• Right front turn signal lamp out
• Left rear turn signal lamp out
• Right rear turn signal lamp out
• Service air filter
• Low Tire Pressure
• Perform service
• ESC System Off
• Service blind spot system
• Blind spot detection unavailable
• Blind spot system off
• Blind spot detection unavailable sensor blocked
• Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Adaptive Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC
system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to • Brake — If the ACC system predicts that its maximum
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set
distance, this message will flash and a chime will
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
• Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a
braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immeslower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to
diately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adaptive
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea• Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to
• Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle — If the
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
• Distance Set — After changing the desired following
equipped).
distance in the ACC system, this message will display
momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error — If the
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your VeACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction
hicle” (if equipped).
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise • Ignition or Accessory On
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
• Ignition or Accessory On Lights On
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Oil temp high Speed may be limited
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor — If the
ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault • Oil temp high Speed limited
that requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer
• Turn signal on
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Park assist on
• Cruise Off When Park Brake is On
• Warning object detected
• ACC Cancelled Below Min. Speed
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Coolant low
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Oil change due > Dealer Info
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Key in ignition
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Lights on
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• Remote start active — Insert Key and Turn to Run
• Service All Wheel Drive System
• Memory 1 profile set
• All Wheel Drive System in neutral
• Memory 2 profile set
• ECO — Fuel Saver Indicator
• Memory system unavailable — Not in Park
• To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual
• Memory system unavailable — Seatbelt buckled
• Memory 1 profile recall
• Memory 2 profile recall
• Wrong Key
• Damaged Key
• Key not programmed
• Park Assist Disabled
• Automatic high beams on
• Automatic high beams off
• AWD AUTO
• LOW RANGE
• SERV AWD
• For AWD Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
in N Press 4 Low
• For AWD High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
in N Press 4 Low
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telllonger exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
tales. These telltales include:
over and let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system
• Shift Lever Status
will cool and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power
The shift lever status “P, R, N, D, L, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1” are Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further
displayed indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5, information.
4, 3, 2, 1” indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) NOTE:
feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For further information on ERS, refer to “Starting • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
And Operating”.
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
• Power Steering System Over Temperature —
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
If Equipped
and during parking maneuvers.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on
service.
the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power
EVIC White Telltale Lights
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
• Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal • SERV AWD
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until The SERV AWD light monitors the electric shift AWD
fuel is added.
system. If the SERV AWD light stays on or comes on
during driving, it means that the AWD system is not
• Loose Gascap Indicator
functioning properly and that service is required.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly EVIC Red Telltale Lights
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten telltales include:
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the • Door Ajar
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
may be ajar.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authostarted. If the light turns on while driving, stop the rized dealer.
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
chime will sound for four minutes when this light
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
turns on.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light informs you of a problem with the
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veIf the light remains lit with the engine running, your
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authonormal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may • Transmission Temperature Warning Light
require towing.
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
This light warns of an overheated engine condialso occur when operating the vehicle in a high
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge aptorque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle Engine Oil Change Indicator System
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
Oil Change Due
light goes off.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
CAUTION!
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Fuel Economy
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
following Fuel Economy Functions displays in the EVIC:
the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times • Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
within 10 seconds.
• Distance To Empty
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode —
If Equipped
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position This feature shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset. To reset the average fuel economy display,
(Do not start the engine.)
press and release the SELECT button once while average
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times fuel economy is highlighted. Once reset, the history
within 10 seconds.
information will be erased, and the averaging will con3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four Distance To Empty (DTE)
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner. Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
Fuel Saver Mode — On
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Vehicle Speed
Trip A
This feature allows you to monitor your vehicle speed on Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
the EVIC display, press and release the SELECT button to reset.
change the units of measure between in MPH or km/h.
Trip B
Trip Info
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
This feature allows you to track the total distance trav- reset.
eled since the last reset and the elapsed time of travel.
Elapsed Time
Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
• Trip A
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
To Reset The Display
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Trip Computer functions. The Trip Functions mode dis- Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
plays the following information:
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the • Trans Temperature
available information displays, then press SELECT to
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
display any one of the following choices.
• Engine Hours
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. Units
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
available information displays, then press SELECT to displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The
display any one of the following choices.
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button the selected setting will be displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more
than one message to step through the remaining stored
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-Nthe Main Menu.
Go™ icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner
of the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch Turn Menu OFF
position.
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. PressRefer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And Oper- ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
ating” for more information.
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
menu back.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But Compass / Temperature Display
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
always re-appears.
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
Messages #
readings and the outside temperature.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
then press the SELECT button.
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the
SELECT button. The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the BACK button to exit.
Compass Variance Map
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
the EVIC.
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows: 5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
NOTE: For the most accurate compass performance, the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
compass variance must be set before performing the
function normally.
manual compass calibration. The variance should be set
Manual Compass Calibration
for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone Customer-Programmable Features (System
map. For further information, refer to “Compass Vari- Setup)
ance.”
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in 3
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
then press the SELECT button.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is displays in the EVIC.
displayed in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the the feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
following choices.
deactivated.
Select Language
When in this display you may select one of five lan- Auto Unlock Doors
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Nav–Turn By Turn
Remote Unlock Sequence
When this feature is selected the navigation system
utilizes voice commands, guiding you through the drive
route mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destination is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected, you can use your RKE
transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals
(if equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the
driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button a check-mark appears next to the feature showing
the system has been activated or the check-mark is
removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer
to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with passive entry and
the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press,
all doors will unlock no matter which passive entry
equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press
is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
the driver’s door is grasped. With passive entry, if Driver
Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more
than once will only result in the driver’s door opening.
You have to touch a passenger passive entry equipped Remote Start Comfort Sys.
door handle to unlock all doors passively when Driver’s
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
Door Only is programmed in the EVIC.
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
seat features will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are
above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the “Flash
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
Headlamps With Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlamps Only)
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
When this feature is selected, the outside rearview mirselection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
rors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
that the setting has been selected.
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the Illuminated Approach
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
feature showing the system has been activated or the and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
check-mark is removed showing the system has been are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
deactivated.
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) — If
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing Equipped
that the setting has been selected.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
When this feature is selected, the HSA system is active.
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
And Operating” for system function and operating inforor the check-mark is removed showing the system has
mation. To make your selection, press and release the
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been Gauge Glow Rings
deactivated.
The gauge glow rings that illuminate the tachometer and
speedometer in the instrument cluster can be turned on
or off. To make your selection, press and release the
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
Temperature display; this message can be turned on or
feature showing the system has been activated or the
off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
button until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
deactivated.
showing that the setting has been selected.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Auto High Beams (Available With SmartBeam™
Only)
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Intermittent Wiper — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the
system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
Alert. By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once,
the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind
Spot: Lights Only” mode. When this mode is selected the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By
pressing and releasing the SELECT button a second time
“Blind Spot: Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this
mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot: Off” is
selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status
of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
most reaction time. To change the setting for more
dynamic driving select the Near setting. This warns you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
when you are much closer. This allows for a more
dynamic driving experience. To change FCW status press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
Park Assist System — If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only
or Sound and Display. To make your selection, scroll up
or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
been selected. Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in Calibrate Compass
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys- Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
tem function and operating information.
Compass Variance
Display Units Of Measure In:
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect® gps (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric units of System Status
measure. To make your selection, press and release the Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears. following System Status messages displays in the EVIC:
Liftgate Chime
• System OK
When this feature is selected the chime will sound when
• System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
the liftgate is in operation, signaling that the liftgate is in
active System Warnings)
operation. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the • Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pressure of all four road tires). For additional information,
feature showing the system has been activated or the
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in “Starting
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
And Operating”.
deactivated.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures” in “Starting And Operating” for additional
information.
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
Tire Pressure Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
If Equipped
Uconnect® 130
Refer to your Uconnect® 730N, 430 or 430N user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped
4
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second TIME Button
time to turn off the radio.
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Clock Setting Procedure
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
volume, and to the left decreases it.
SCROLL control knob.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
set at the same volume level as last played.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
SEEK Buttons
will begin to blink.
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conto seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
trol knob to save time change.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise sound level from the right or left side speakers.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL AM/FM Button
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
mid-range tones.
RW/FF
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
Buttons 1 - 6
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on button works in a similar manner.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
AM/FM Button
SEEK Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
TIME Button
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of folder levels: 8
file recording media and formats are limited. When
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
Supported Media (Disc Types)
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
display.)
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
character extension)
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal VBR bit rate.
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
MPEG
Sampling FreDiscs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification
quency (kHz)
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
MPEG-1 Audio
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
longer disc loading times.
Layer 3
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
Supported MP3 File Formats
56, 48, 40, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
Layer 3
112, 96, 80, 64,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
56, 48, 40, 32,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
24, 16, 8
not play the file.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
supported by the radios.
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
Playback of MP3 Files
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
by the following:
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
system to amplify the source and play through the
CD-R media
vehicle speakers.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
to load than non-multisession discs
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
increase with more files and folders
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is ACC position to operate the radio.
OFF).
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
screen.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make TIME Button
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
stations without stopping, until you release it.
and radio frequency.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Clock Setting Procedure
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
Equipped
SCROLL control knob.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
details.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ RW/FF
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
trol knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
procedure, starting at Step 2.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
INFO Button
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ format types:
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
16-Digit Character
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Program Type
Display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
No program type or
None
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
undefined
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
the front and rear speakers.
Classical
Classicl
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
College
College
MUSIC TYPE Button
Country
Country
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Foreign Language
Language
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
16-Digit Character
Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Program Type
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the be stored into pushbutton memory.
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL condisplay window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
save time change.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM Button
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SETUP Button
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons 1 - 6
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
MP3 Audio Play
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
NOTE:
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
CAUTION!
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
display.)
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
ignition is OFF).
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welIf Equipped
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
If Equipped
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Selecting Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display.
Please have the following information available when A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite
calling:
radio mode.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Satellite Antenna
Number (ESN/SID).
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
ESN/SID Access
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posion or above the antenna.
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is Reception Quality
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number following reasons:
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
the radio to exit this screen.
structure or under a physical obstacle.
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause signal blockage.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® Multimedia
button a second time.
(Satellite) Mode
INFO Button
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaACC position to operate the radio.
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availSEEK Buttons
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next additional three seconds will make the radio display the
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will to normal display).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
TUNE Control (Rotary)
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
MUSIC TYPE Button
following items:
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
seconds will allow the program format type to be seSirius subscription.
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
RW/FF
type.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2.
This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored
into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
or glove compartment.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® radio User’s Manual for iPod® or external
USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console or glove compart- NOTE: The center console will have a position where the
ment.
iPod® or consumer electronic audio device cable can be
routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
routed may be located in the base of the center console on
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
not available in the center console base, route the cable
etc.) information on the radio display.
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
audio device).
pressing radio switches, as described below.
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely disUsing Radio Buttons
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/ access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX”
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod®/USB/
Using This Feature
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
connect to the USB port:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Play Mode
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF>> button.
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
jump backward or forward respectively, for five secfaceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
onds.
USB device and display data:
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button
previous track.
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
Track⬙.
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
track.
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 de- audio device.
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
each track in the current list and then forward to the
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
device or external USB device.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
<< SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
and next tracks.
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
delay in updating the information on the radio
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display may be noticeable.
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counter• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
clockwise) to get to the track faster.
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device. Turn
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
external USB device.
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
• Preset 1 – Playlists
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
• Preset 2 – Artists
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the
radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Selecting Different Audio Device
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
playing will display info.
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) — If
Uconnect® phone system to list audio devices.
Equipped
Next Track
Getting Started
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track”, to jump to the next music • Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button in the
track on your cellular phone.
center of the overhead console behind the screen.
Previous Track
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track”, to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted
into the VES™ player, the screen turns on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES™).
• The Remote Control
• The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)
Overhead Video Screen
Play A DVD
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position, 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
Control knob.
Or
Press the LOAD button then corresponding number (1–6)
where the DVD is to be loaded (Non-Touch-Screen).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
4
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list appears on the right side of
the screen, touch the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the
Rear VES Controls screen.
Rear VES Soft-Key
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in the
MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key
at the top left of the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
NOTE: The “1” and “2” soft-keys are displayed for the
headphone channels. Touch 1 or 2 based on which
channel you want to change, select the new mode from
the available list on the right. Modes that are unavailable
are greyed-out.
4
Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The MEDIA
Column
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
Play Video Games
1. Video In – Yellow
2. Left Audio In – White
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA 3. Right Audio In – Red
input jacks located on the back of the center console.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
4
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press
ENTER on the Remote Control.
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES 3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then touch AUX 1 in the VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
column. To exit press the back arrow soft-key at the
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
top of the screen.
Rear VES Soft-Key
Select Channel/Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES
Column
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
source appears on the screen.
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES 3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
Rear VES Soft-Key
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
Column
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
simultaneously.
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
and right side equates to Channel 2.
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
starts playing the first track.
Channel 2 is for audio only.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
will display on the screen and the audio will be heard
switch is on Channel 1.
on Channel 1 in the headphones.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the Video Screen is closed.
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeat- • Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
edly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
on the right side of the screen.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
the MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow at
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
the top left of the screen.
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
Rear VES Soft-key
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VES™ Remote Control – If Equipped
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position,
the remote controls the functionality of screen Channel
1 (right side of the screen). When the selector switch is
Remote Control
in the Channel 2, position the remote controls the
Controls And Indicators
functionality of screen Channel 2 (left side of the
screen).
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable 10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressthrough the current audio track or video chapter. In
ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
satellite video mode, press to advance to the next
the radio. When listening to compressed audio on a
channel. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
data disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and
PROG Down selects the previous directory. When
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple-disc
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to
changer, PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG
the start of the current or previous audio track or
Down selects the previous disc.
video chapter. In satellite video mode, press to advance to the previous channel. In menu modes, use to 11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
navigate in the menu.
for the selected channel.
7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD 12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
disc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
the Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
RANDOM for a CD).
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this
manual for details on changing modes.
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP 18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
button to access the display settings (see the display
menu.
settings section) or the DVD Setup menu. When a
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
disc is loaded in the DVD player (if equipped) and
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
the VES™ mode is selected and the disc is stopped,
next audio track or video chapter. In satellite video
press the SETUP button to access the DVD Setup
mode, press to advance to the next channel. In menu
menu. (see the DVD Setup Menu of this manual.)
modes, use to navigate in the menu.
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
Remote Control Storage
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
contents.
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
rewind through the current audio track or video difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
chapter. In satellite video mode, press to advance to storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
the previous channel. In menu modes use to navigate two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
in the menu.
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
player (if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped
with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to
turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s)
indicate when Video Lock is active.
• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
operation of the VES™.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
Locking The Remote Control
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
The Remote Control Storage
• To disable the Remote Control from making any • Replace the battery compartment cover.
changes, press the Video Lock button on the DVD
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully 1. Volume Control
2. Power Button
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
3. Channel Selection Switch
4. Power Indicator
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
on the right ear cup.
Controls
2. Press the SOURCE button on the remote control.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve 3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
as a DVD Video), pressing DISPLAY shows the status
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
is turned off.
Pressing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen.
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone 4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to naviselector switch.
gate to the available modes and press the OK button to
NOTE:
select the new mode.
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is 5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to
BACK button on the remote control.
the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
operation. To replace the batteries:
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
downward.
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
according to the polarity diagram shown.
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace• Replace the battery compartment cover.
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
Warranty
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTWho Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEthe initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire- FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer- INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUable.
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Shared Modes
System Information
The VES™ and radio are capable of communicating with
each other. This allows the VES™ to output radio audio
to the headphones and the radio to output VES™ audio
to the vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ are in
the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be visible on
the radio’s display and the shared icon will be visible on
the VES™ screen. When in shared mode, the same audio
source is heard in the headphones and vehicle speakers
simultaneously.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293- mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
3332 or email [email protected]. radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT).
The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM),
SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as
long as it is not in shared mode.
When in shared disc or satellite video mode both the
radio and the VES™ have control of the video functions.
The VES™ has the ability to control the following video
modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Information Mode Display
to the items called out by number, the remaining information displays the current status of the source (such as
station frequency, name, preset or track number, song
title, artist name, album name, etc.).
1. Channel 1 Mode – Displays the current source for
Channel 1.
2. Channel 1 Shared Status – When the icon is displayed,
the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the radio
and playing through the cabin speakers.
Information Mode Video Screen Display
3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute - Audio: The audio only
icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen
system. Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the
audio for Channel 1 has been muted using the remote
control’s MUTE button.
When information mode is active, the current mode
setting for both audio channels is displayed. In addition 4. Channel 2 Mode – Displays the current source for
Channel 2.
4
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Channel 2 Shared Status – When the icon is displayed, 8. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action – When the ENTER
the audio for Channel 2 is also shared with the radio
button on the remote control is pressed with the
⬙DIRECT TUNE⬙ button visible on the screen, the
and playing through the cabin speakers.
screen shows a numeric entry keypad which allows
6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute – Audio: Only in a single
you to enter a specific tuner frequency, or tuner
screen system: The audio only icon is displayed on
channel for AM/FM/MW/LW (see Numeric Keypad
Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode. Mute:
Menu section).
when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for Channel 2 has been muted using the remote control’s 9. Clock – Displays the time.
MUTE button.
10. Video Lock – When the icon is displayed, the remote
control functions are disabled.
7. Channel 1 ENTER Button Action – When the ENTER
button on the remote control is pressed with the
11. Not Available / Error – Operational or status errors
⬙INPUT FILE #⬙ button visible on the screen, the screen
are displayed here.
shows a numeric entry keypad which allows you to
enter a specific track number on data discs and HDD 12. Disc Changer Status – When the source for either
(see Numeric Keypad Menu section of this manual).
Channel 1 or Channel 2 is a multi-disc changer, the
Also, Enter Button Action – “INPUT TRK #” to enter a
disc loaded / selected status is displayed.
specific track number on audio discs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
Mode Selection Menu
always the default selection. The mode can be changed
for either Channel/Screen 1 or Channel/Screen 2 using
the remote control.
Use the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, 䉴, 䉳)
to navigate through the available modes, and then press
the remote control’s ENTER button to select the mode.
An alternate method of changing modes is repeated
pressing of the MODE button until the desired mode is
highlighted then press the ENTER button on the remote
control to select the mode.
In a single screen system, when a video mode (such as
DVD-video, Aux video, etc.) is active and Channel/
Screen 1 is selected using the remote control selector
Mode Selection Menu
switch, the first press of the remote control’s MODE
The first press of the MODE button causes the Mode button causes the Mode Selection menu to appear.
Selection menu to appear on screen. The current mode is
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Numeric Keypad Menu
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency,
satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired
digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲,
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote control’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these
steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
Numeric Keypad Menu
Station List Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired station, Disc Menu
press the remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that
station. To jump through the list more quickly, navigate
to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
4
Disc Menu For CDs
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing the
remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all commands which control playback of the disc. Using the options
you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random play.
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER
button.
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc player.
in Play mode, Aux Video, SIRIUS Backseat TV™, etc.), Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearscreen closed:
ance of the video on the screen. The factory default
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
• Close the video screen.
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote • Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically se• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
lect the next available audio mode without using the
format files
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is The Blu-Ray player is capable of the playing the followilluminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the ing types of discs (12 cm diameter):
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1),
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries • DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the follow- • DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
ing types of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter):
profile 3.0
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DVD/BD Region Codes
Recorded Discs
The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will stop playing and a warning will be displayed.
The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
each track number is unique.
DVD player.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
supported.
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
these extensions for any other types of files.
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about • For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
burning playable discs.
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down- • To change the current directory, use the remote conloaded from many online music stores) will not play.
trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
begin playing the next available file.
Disc Errors
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays
player will automatically skip the file and begin playand the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or
ing the next available file.
incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
supported. For both formats, the recommended
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or first track.
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
previous file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot Display
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera- Other Language Setup
ture is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player
will display ⬙VES High Temp⬙ and will shut off the VES™
displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
player.
4
The Blu-ray player may require additional reading time
during extremely cold weather conditions. When this
occurs, allow the vehicles interior temperature to warm,
then insert disc into player.
DVD Player Language Menu
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting • When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the language code is
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Engnot valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙夡⬙. If the
lish. These languages are selected using a special fourdigits are visible after this step, then the language code
digit code.
is valid.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
Menu and follow these additional instructions:
language codes, please contact the dealer where the
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor butvehicle was purchased.
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
and then press the remote control ENTER button.
Language
Code
Language
Code
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then press the remote control’s
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, select a digit for the current position. After
selecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
selection sequence for all four digits.
Dutch
German
Portuguese
2311
1304
2519
French
Italian
Spanish
1517
1819
1418
Rating and Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work together to
control the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most
DVD-Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
them where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and higher numbers are designated for more adult
audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
4
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
DVD Password Entry
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • After the four-digit password is entered, press the
follow these additional instructions:
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is
correct, the set password screen is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.
DVD Player Level Menu
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
follow these additional instructions:
buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
Product Agreement
buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intelleccontrol’s ENTER button.
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherthe value for the current digit, and then press the wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next disassembly is prohibited.
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
digits.
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights
reserved.
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
Remote Sound System Controls
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/CD/ Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
control is different depending on which mode you are in. after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
precautions:
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
• When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode
operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using
the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto
blower operation will be set automatically.
4
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
1. A/C Button
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for opPress and release to change the current Air Conditioning
timum comfort and convenience.
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior into manual mode.
comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Recirculation Control Button
7. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
This display shows the temperature setting for the left selected.
front seat occupant.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
4. Mode Display
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, control. Push the button for warmer temperature setBi-Level, Floor, Mix).
tings.
5. Blower Control Display
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
6. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
front seat occupant.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
10. Auto Temperature Control Button
13. Mode Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
11. Blower Control
14. SYNC Button
Press and release to control the temperature setting for
both zones from the driver temperature control.
15. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the Provides the driver with independent temperature conlowest blower setting. Performing this function will trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
16. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
Press and release to turn the Climate Control OFF.
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Rear Control Button
NOTE:
Provides the rear seat occupants with independent blower • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
and temperature control. Push the button to activate the
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
rear climate control and allow the rear seat occupants
comfort as quickly as possible.
control of the rear blower and temperature settings.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Control (ATC) Panel.
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the de- mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
sired temperature is displayed, the system will on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Automatic Operation
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
This system offers a full complement of manual override
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
features.
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, Auto mode.
temperature control will continue to operate automatiThe operator can also select the direction of the airflow
cally.
by selecting one of the following positions.
Blower Control
Panel Mode
Manual Operation
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
Use the outer dial control to regulate
the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control clockwise and decreases
when you move the control counterclockwise.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
4
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level Mode
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets.
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side winNOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi–Level
dow defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
blower will automatically default to medium-high unless
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
the blower is controlled manually.
Floor Mode
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
of air is directed through the defrost and side ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
window demister outlets.
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Mix Mode
Air Conditioning (A/C)
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
while keeping the windshield clear.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system. Also, make sure to select only
Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
pressing the Recirculation control button. Recirculation
mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculation
LED will illuminate when this button is selected. Push
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation
mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
• If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
mode is not allowed in the Defrost modes to improve
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
window clearing operation. Recirculation will be dis• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, abled automatically if Defrost is selected.
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Rear Climate Control — If Equipped
Recirculation Control
The Rear Climate Control system has floor air outlets,
and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or position. The unit provides warm or cool air through the
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, floor and upper outlets.
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
4
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
If the rear system is off, changing the rear setting to a
position other than off will turn the rear system on. If
both the front and rear systems are off, the rear system
will not turn on. The rear system will not operate with
the front system off.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 – Rear Blower
2 – Rear Climate Control Icon
3 – Rear Temperature
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the Rear Temperature Control
second row seat occupants have control of the rear Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the
blower speed.
second row seat occupants have control of the rear
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead temperature control knob.
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds. To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
4
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
floor outlets.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
Floor Mode
Defrost mode.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
Operating Tips
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
Window Fogging
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
Bi-Level Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
Summer Operation
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature trailer
tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance
may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from
overheating during the high load condition.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.
4
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .453
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
(3.6L Engine) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .450
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
(3.6L Engine) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) (5.7L Engine) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ When To Use LOW Range – If Equipped . . . . .480
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE
ONLY – IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .490
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires –
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .507
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .513
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .521
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .523
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .524
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ 3.6L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
▫ 5.7L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . .
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .536
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .539
. . .539
. . .540
. . .541
. . .542
. . .542
. . .542
. . .543
. . .543
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .546 䡵 SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .564
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Recreational Towing – Rear-Wheel Drive
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
(Two-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-NGo™ FOBIK is in the passenger
compartment.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing The Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and read- 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
able.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
position.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
Removing The Button
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
the button loose.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions – With Driver’s
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle Or NEUTRAL Position)
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in and START. To change the ignition switch positions
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the follow these steps.
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
Park” message and the engine will remain running. • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
could roll.
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time If Engine Fails To Start
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
WARNING!
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proceIf the engine fails to start after you have followed the
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
hold it.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
release it as soon as the starter engages.
hold it.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 sec- The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
onds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
The engine block heater cord is located:
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
• 3.6L Engine – coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
• 5.7L Engine – bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be in PARK before
the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF position. The
key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the OFF position, and the shift lever is
locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
hundred miles (kilometers).
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
pedal must be pressed.
moving the shift lever between these gears.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
(3.6L Engine) — If Equipped
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downThe shift lever position display (located in the instrument shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK Operation” in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will select NOTE:
the highest available transmission gear, and will display
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
that gear in the instrument cluster as 3, 2, 1.
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the OFF
position first.
PARK
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, the shift
lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
The following indicators should be used to ensure that started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
(Continued)
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section) to select a
lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
This range should be used for most city and highway
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downMode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
DRIVE
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is se- 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
lected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
operation.
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomdriven to an authorized dealer for service without dammend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
aging the transmission.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
following steps:
dealer service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gears normally.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
lever to the left (-) will downshift the transmission,
activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the
instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the shift lever
to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top available
gears.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1
1
2
1-2
3
1-3
4
1-4
D
1-5
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following concondition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
ditions are present:
hundred miles (kilometers).
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
moving the shift lever between these gears.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
(5.7L Engine) — If Equipped
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downThe shift lever position display (located in the instrument shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK Operation” in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will select
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
Overdrive Operation
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
the highest available transmission gear, and will display NOTE:
that gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the OFF
position first.
PARK
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, the shift
lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
The following indicators should be used to ensure that started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
(Continued)
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
automatically upshifts through underdrive first and second gears, direct third gear and overdrive fourth and
fifth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
To access all six available gears, you must use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section).
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range
Select (ERS) Operation” in this section) to select a lower
gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
DRIVE
range will improve performance and extend transmission
This range should be used for most city and highway life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downIf the transmission temperature exceeds normal operatshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
ing limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature imtorque converter clutch engagement. This is done to proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
differently until the transmission cools down.
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
Transmission Limp Home Mode
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
significant additional heat load on the cooling system. Transmission function is monitored electronically for
Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is seexcess heat generation.
lected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
be modified depending on engine and transmission
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomdriven to an authorized dealer for service without dam- mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
aging the transmission.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
dealer service is required.
following steps:
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
1. Stop the vehicle.
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
3. Turn the engine OFF.
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gears normally.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal additional underdrive gear which is not normally used
during through-gear accelerations. This additional gear
operation.
can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability
when towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode,
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
drive. ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears ) are the same as the the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift
lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
normal fourth and fifth gears.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
WARNING!
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that personal injury.
gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
available gear.
shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the
The instrument cluster display will show the requested
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
top gear limit, however the transmission will not downshift to the requested gear if doing so would overspeed
the engine. The transmission will downshift once the
vehicle speed has slowed sufficiently.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the
following conditions are present:
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transtemperature,
mission will automatically downshift (for engine brak• the engine coolant has reached an adequate ing) during steady braking maneuvers.
temperature,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high,
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator, and
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine
is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. Normal operation is always
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are
warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving].
Because top gear is disabled, and engine speed is
higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting
properly when cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate
that the transmission is able to shift into and out of
Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
(3.6L Engine) – If Equipped
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time allwheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
NOTE: This system is not appropriate for conditions
where LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Off-Road
Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) (5.7L Engine) –
If Equipped
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three
mode positions:
• All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD AUTO)
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated
by the AWD Control Switch, which is located on the • All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
center console.
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the AWD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. All-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction.
AWD Control Switch (Three-Position)
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
by rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired
position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifting instructions. The LOW RANGE position is designed
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the
LOW RANGE position on dry hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages (AWD
AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in the EVIC 1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
(Electronic Vehicle Information Center) and indicate the
current and desired transfer case selection. Refer to 2. The newly selected position indicator light will con“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Untinue to flash.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When you select a different transfer case position, 3. The transfer case will not shift.
the position indicator lights will do the following:
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
WARNING! (Continued)
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
the control knob back to the current position, wait five injury.
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requireNOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
damage to driveline components.
The “SERV AWD” Warning Light” monitors the elecWhen operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the
tronic shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
engine speed is approximately three times that of the
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
AWD AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not
means that the all-wheel drive system is not functioning
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
properly and that service is required.
(40 km/h).
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD Warning Light”
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
(Continued)
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction, For additional information on the appropriate use of each
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping transfer case mode position, see the information below:
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
AWD AUTO
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range – This range sends power to
the rear wheels. The all-wheel drive system will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
LOW Range
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides low
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
N
Neutral – This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the
requirements for the selected position have been met.
To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
original position, make certain all shift requirements
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
AWD AUTO TO LOW RANGE
NOTE: When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
3. While still rolling, rotate the AWD control switch to
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
the desired position.
in process, the desired position indicator light will flash
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not continuously while the original position indicator light is
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
ON, until all requirements have been met.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
With the ignition switch in the ON position and the ON position, then the shift will not take place and no
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, engine off.
After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
3. Place the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Alternate Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
4. Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen,
etc.) for four seconds until the LED light by the switch
starts to blink indicating shift in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL
shift is complete.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
Neutral Switch
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use LOW Range – If Equipped
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding and ⴖcrow-hopⴖ; use only on
wet or slippery surfaces.
When off-road driving, shift to LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in Driving Through Water
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
LOW range.
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
CAUTION!
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The
flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
Driving through water more than a few inches/ that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure drifting.
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must Standing Water
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
to minimize wave effects.
Maintenance
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contami- Hill Climbing
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to preconditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
vent component damage.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW. Use first
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional gear and LOW for very steep hills.
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
gear and shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary. Refer
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
to “All-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operand immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
ating” for further information. Do not shift to a lower
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
gear than necessary to maintain forward motion. Overallowing the compression braking of the engine to help
revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
be lost.
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, be- skidding the tires.
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the
hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmisdrive straight up or down.
sion whenever possible.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
values specified in the Service Manual.
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
correct the situation.
propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or POWER STEERING
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake 3.6L Engine
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
and cleaned as soon as possible.
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electrohydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM”
message and a flashing icon are displayed on
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in
the power steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe,
then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments
until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operations, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
parking maneuvers.
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
NOTE:
and during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
service.
there is a problem with the power steering system.
5.7L Engine
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steerThe standard power steering system will give you good
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
steering capability if power assist is lost.
does not in any way damage the steering system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
– IF EQUIPPED
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
Parking Brake
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition parking brake should always be applied whenever the
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in driver is not in the vehicle.
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never
leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
(Continued)
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake Lock Differential
(BLD), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING! (Continued)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls others.
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Traction Control System (TCS)
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
Operating” for further information.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
WARNING!
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics stability.
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The (BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those re- controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa- system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
bilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
(Continued)
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
WARNING! (Continued)
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
This system enhances directional control and stability of
other vehicles.
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
WARNING!
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi- counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Entions, and driving conditions, influence the chance gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot maintain the desired path.
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
(Continued)
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the
instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the
TCS is active. If the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light”
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
The ESC system has two available operating modes in
AWD AUTO range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and
one operating mode in AWD LOW range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would norOn
mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
AUTO range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from AWD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
AWD AUTO range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
AUTO Range (All-Wheel Drive Models) Or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
ESC OFF Switch
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
AWD AUTO range or NEUTRAL to AWD LOW range,
the ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
WARNING!
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is reWhen in “Partial Off” mode, the enhanced vehicle quired. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
AWD Low Range (LOW)
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
Partial Off
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD LOW
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in AWD LOW
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
the intended direction of travel.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
greater hill.
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backperiod of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON NOTE:
position. It should go out with the engine
• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authothat caused the ESC activation.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (loElectronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
off
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
EXAMPLE:
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
B-Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information
Placard
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
capacity calculated in Step 4.
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occumanual to determine how this reduces the available
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and NOTE:
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
• The following table shows examples on how to calcu3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and paslate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
• For the following example, the combined weight of
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
(392 kg).
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are underProper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
inflated.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condiof outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
temperature changes.
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires
tion. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
WARNING!
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
WARNING!
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. AlHigh speed driving with your vehicle under maxiways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
combine them with other types of tires.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Tire Repair
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
75 mph (120 km/h).
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat,
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable) and
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm)
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
additional information.
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immeyour vehicle.
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be- mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and safety and handling of your vehicle.
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
All Season Tires – If Equipped
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
tire inflation pressures.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
checked before using these tire types.
80D18 103M.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
Tire Spinning
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to replacement tires in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, the Security Chain Company
(SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended on P265/60R18 or 265/50R20
tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being perThe tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at formed.
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
unequal rates.
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
shown in the following diagram.
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire placard pressure.
Tire Rotation
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
turned off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure value.
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage
to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
the tire.
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
Base System
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate, a warning mestechnology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to sage to appear, or the chime to sound.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
readings to the Receiver Module.
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly cluster for a minimum of five seconds, and an audible
check the tire pressure in all of your tires, and to maintain chime will be activated, when one or more of the four
the proper pressure.
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
The TPMS consists of the following components:
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
• Receiver Module
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish,
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
housings.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. In addition, a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message will be displayed for a minimum of
five seconds when a system fault is detected, and a chime
will sound. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur by any of the following:
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
to be ON, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
TPM sensors.
displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of
five seconds, and a chime to sound. Driving the
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
that affects radio wave signals.
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” as long as none of the road tires are below the
low pressure warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire, in place of a road tire, that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of
five seconds, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn ON. After driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be
displayed for a minimum of five seconds. For each
subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed
for a minimum of five seconds, and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. Once you repair
or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an auThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
following components:
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
• Receiver Module
EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for
a minimum of five seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Inforwhich display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your InstruCenter (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
ment Panel” for further information.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
displayed in the ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message. The system
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
will automatically update, the graphic display of the
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as • If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
NOTE:
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
will sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
to be ON, a chime to sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESon and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
SURE” message to appear in the EVIC, and the graphic
display will still show the low tire pressure value
addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
“flashing.” Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as long as none of
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
road tires are below the low pressure warning threshwill flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
old.
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opSYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
eration.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the ing licenses:
TPMS will update automatically.
MRXC4W4MA4
In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” United States
2546A-C4W4MA4
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a Canada
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in FUEL REQUIREMENTS
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to 3.6L Engine – If Equipped
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
This engine is designed to meet all emisGeneral Information
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when usThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiprovide any benefit over regular gasoline in these ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
engines.
5.7L Engine – If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum
performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are speLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at prove air quality.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containgenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
E-85 perform the following:
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
• change the engine oil and oil filter
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the Materials Added To Fuel
engine controller memory
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
exposure to E-85 fuel.
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
MMT In Gasoline
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) fuel.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
E-85 Fuel Cap
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
E-85 Badge
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on NOTE:
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternatthe above recommendations are followed, especially
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recomwhen the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
mended.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
Replacement Parts
Maintenance
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under 2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
the headlamp switch).
cap.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator light
to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you 5. Pull the release cable.
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will come
on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin,
this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
Release Cable
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
will display in the EVIC telltale display area. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
SELECT button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- Payload
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires Loading
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
Rim Size
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
Inflation Pressure
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way and recommendations in this manual concerning vethe brakes operate.
hicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING! (Continued)
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and and trailer when weighed in combination.
ready for operation⬙ condition.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your allowance for the presence of a driver.
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
WARNING!
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certificamore, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If information.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Tongue Weight (TW)
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
Frontal Area
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
5
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, and braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
5
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine
3.6L
3.6L
5.7L
5.7L
GCWR (Gross
Max. GTW
Combined Wt.
Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer
Rating)
Wt.)
RWD
11,600 lbs
40 sq ft
6,200 lbs
(5 262 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(2 812 kg)
AWD
11,600 lbs
40 sq ft
6,200 lbs
(5 262 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(2 812 kg)
RWD
13,100 lbs
60 sq ft
7,200 lbs
(5 942 kg)
(5.57 sq m)
(3 266 kg)
AWD
13,100 lbs
60 sq ft
7,200 lbs
(5 942 kg)
(5.57 sq m)
(3 266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Model
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
620 lbs (281 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. The addition of passengers and cargo may
require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may
be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lbs (1 769 kg).
• Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package
are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs tongue weight).
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed
the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer
hitch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive• The tongue weight of the trailer
train components, the following guidelines are recom• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment mended.
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
5
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
WARNING! (Continued)
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized .
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
Towing Requirements – Tires
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
GVWR and GAWR limits.
spare tire.
5
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
Four-Pin Connector
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy
to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select
TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select [ERS] shift control).
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped) or
selecting a lower gear range (using the ERS shift control)
while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This
action will also provide better engine braking.
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter(s) as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level before towing Reduce speed.
(5.7L engine).
Air Conditioning
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
Turn off temporarily.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed SNOW PLOW
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
you can get back to cruising speed.
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectmaximize fuel efficiency.
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
5
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF the
Ground
NONE
Rear-Wheel
Drive Models
NOT
ALLOWED
All-Wheel Drive Models
•
•
•
•
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
Towing Condition
Dolly Tow
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Front
On Trailer
Rear
ALL
Rear-Wheel
Drive Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
All-Wheel Drive Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
into PARK.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
4. Turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob from the
ignition switch.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
Recreational Towing – Rear-Wheel Drive Models
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. 5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
5
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case. the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
ground.
selector switch in any mode position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
recreational towing.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
(Continued)
5
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
(Continued)
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission into PARK.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, remove the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ button and use the key fob to
complete this procedure. Refer to “Installing And
Removing The ENGINE START/STOP Button/
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting and Operating”
recreational towing.
for how to remove Keyless Enter-N-Go™ button.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL
(N) button (located by the selector switch) for four
seconds, until the light behind the N symbol starts to
blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop
blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL
(N) is complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM
IN NEUTRAL” message will display on the EVIC
(Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
8. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
9. Start the engine.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure NOTE:
that there is no vehicle movement.
• Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met
12. Turn OFF the engine.
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and
13. Firmly apply the parking brake.
the shift has been completed. If any of these require14. Shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key
ments are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N)
fob.
button or are no longer met during the four second
timer, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
CAUTION!
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
tow bar.
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
16. Release the parking brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid
press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL
gear clash.
(N) button (located by the selector switch) for one
second.
7. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the NOTE:
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
selector switch.
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
10. Release the brake pedal.
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
12. Start the engine.
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
14. Release the parking brake.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
16. The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ button (if equipped) may
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
now be reinstalled if desired. Refer to “Starting
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Procedures/Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .575 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .596
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ All-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
6
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
6
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Jack Storage Location
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack to
loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
6
Thumb Screw Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
Spare Tire Location
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the lug wrench handle and extension to completely
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the
winch stops.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it 5. Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull
vertically behind the rear bumper.
the metal stamping toward you to release it from the
plastic plate.
6
Spare Tire
Tab Location
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube 7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the
and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and push
protective plate from the steel spare wheel.
it through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
Releasing Protective Plate
Sleeve And Cable
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, away from
traffic.
3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain
in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Place the transmission in PARK, set the parking brake
and activate the Hazard Warning flashers.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
6
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
(Continued)
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by 3. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
still on the ground.
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
6
Jack And Tool Assembly
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Front Jack Location
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
Lift Point On Sill Molding
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel
nut tightness is 110 ft lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool from
inside the aluminum road wheel and position the
wheel behind the rear bumper with the “beauty side”
facing rearward.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective
plate in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the end
of the winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and stamped
cone shape wheel plate though the road wheel and
protective plate.
6
“Beauty Side”
NOTE: The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel
from being scratched when sliding it under the vehicle.
Installing Winch
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protec- NOTE: Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
tive plate until it is directly under the winch and underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
between the rear bumper and exhaust system heat may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
shields. Raise the tire by turn the lug wrench on the
winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
WARNING!
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact-type tools may damage the winch mechanism.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the
flap on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools
in the bag underneath the others. Use the Velcro
straps to secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug
wrench on the forward side of the jack. Expand the
jack on the bracket by turning the thumb screw
clockwise until it is tight to prevent rattles.
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo Road Tire Installation
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
in the rear storage bin.
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
lug nuts.
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire,
jack and tool kit.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until precautions.
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt
CAUTION!
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
station.
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a alternator or electrical system may occur.
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
JUMP-STARTING
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump- It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Preparations For Jump-Start
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenso please follow the procedures in this section carefully. ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
WARNING!
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
6
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri- Jump-Starting Procedure
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to
remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
the reverse sequence:
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
the discharged battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
you should have the battery and charging system tested
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
at your authorized dealer.
battery.
6
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “ElecIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
tronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
front wheels. Press and hold the lock button on the shift
mode.
lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
(Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
damage to the vehicle.
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
WARNING!
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus3. Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder (located
ing serious injury.
next to the shifter on the center console).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the 6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
shift lever override access cover (located on the bothole, and push and hold the override release lever
down.
tom of the cupholder).
7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and
cupholder liner.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
6
598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
the Ground
NONE
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
Flatbed
RWD MODELS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
AWD MODELS
See instructions in “Recreational
Towing” under “Starting and
Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599
If the key fob is unavailable or the battery is discharged, Rear-Wheel Drive Models
refer to “Shift Lever Override” in “What To Do In The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
transmission out of PARK for towing.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
CAUTION!
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUDo not use sling type equipment when towing. TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the key fob is with
a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe engine or transmission damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels on the ground.
All-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for detailed
instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed will
all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .603
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .604
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .605
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . .652
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .653
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . .641
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
▫ Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .650
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).”
It will also store diagnostic codes and other information Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
soon as possible.
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
do the following:
PROGRAMS
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
not crank or start the engine.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
this test over.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 3. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
of a normal bulb check.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was turer’s warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart
(0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE
range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE
range.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change intermanufacturer only recommends
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
API Certified engine oils.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaSAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
tion.
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operengine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Comating” for further information.
partment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifiNOTE: SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9.55535-S1
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
or Fiat 9.55535-S3 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine
should not be used.
oil meeting MS- 6395 is not available.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adSAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
performance may be impaired by supplemental addiThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended tives.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Engine Air Cleaner Filter
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
maintenance intervals.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
WARNING!
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position. amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- 1 — Wiper Arm
sary.
2 — Pivot Cap
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
liftgate glass.
blade off of the liftgate glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
blade holder.
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be flushed with
OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
Adding Coolant
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
bottle need only be checked once a month.
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MSpuddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek 12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground overfill.
spills immediately.
Points To Remember
Coolant Level
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the from the front of the engine compartment. This is norengine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporindicated on the bottle.
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
expansion bottle must also be protected against
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
freezing.
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
emissions.
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the
fill hole.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the Transfer Case
fill hole.
Fluid Level Check
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
cast iron housings.
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole, Selection Of Lubricant
when the vehicle is in a level position.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Drain
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom- only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
this section for fluid specifications. It is important to
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using
the recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives
Fluid Level Check – 3.6L Engine
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
any special additives in the transmission.
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transtives to the transmission. The only exception to this mission fluid level using a special service dipstick.
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
adversely affect seals.
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission
damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check – 5.7L Engine
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the shift lever in
PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission
is at normal operating temperature (approximately 6. Remove the dipstick again, and note the fluid level on
180°F / 82°C). This occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km)
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
of driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the
actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
Use the following procedure to check the fluid level
should be between the ⬙HOT⬙ (upper) reference holes
properly:
on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube
to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use
2. Run the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
ONLY the recommended fluid (see ⬙Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts⬙ for fluid specifications).
After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick
tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to
fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the
fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until
the temperature is elevated enough to produce an
accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to
warm the fluid.
7. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is
normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from
its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains
engaged in the dipstick tube.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission What Causes Corrosion?
is disassembled for any reason.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
7
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and If Equipped
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
with a clean, dry towel.
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
Interior Care
required to maintain the original condition.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
stone breakage than glass headlights.
scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and directly on the mirror.
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folThe lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
lowed by rinsing.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
Glass Surfaces
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
rag.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Headlights
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses
and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover
that corresponds to the following chart.
Cavity
J01
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
Air Suspension
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J02
J03
J04
J05
J06
J07
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Power Liftgate
Module
Trailer Tow
J08
J09
Driver Door Node
J10
Passenger Door
Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability
Control System
J11
J12
J13
J14
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
60 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Blue
Mini
Fuse
Description
Power Seat
E-Brake
Headlamp Wash
Relay Contact
Drive Train Control
Module
Rear Defroster
Main Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
Trailer Tow
Lamps/Park Lamps
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
Cavity
J15
J17
J18
J19
J20
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Blue
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Front Cabin Fan/
Blower
Starter Motor
Solenoid
Powertrain Control
Module/Powertrain
Control Module/
Transmission Range
Radiator Fan Motor
HI/Radiator Fan
Motor Low
Front Wiper
J21
J22
M1
M2
M3
M5
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
Mini
Fuse
Description
Front/Rear Washer
Control
Sunroof Module
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
Stop Lamps
Electronic Limit
Slip Differential/
Air Suspension
Liftgate/Headrest
115V AC Power
Inverter
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
Cigar Lighter
Power Outlet #2
(Switchable)
Front Heated Seat
& Steering Wheel
Rear Heated Seats
Video/Universal
Garage Door
Opener
Mini
Fuse
Description
M11
10 Amp
Red
M12
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Heating, Ventilation
& Air Conditioning
(Climate Control
System)
Radio/Amplifier
M13
M14
Cartridge
Fuse
Instrument Cluster
Back Up Camera –
If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Cavity
M15
M16
M18
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
20 Amp
Yellow
Power Seat
Module(s)/
Adaptive Cruise
Control/Audio
Telematics/
Daytime Running
Lights Relay/Air
Suspension
Module/Instrument
Cluster
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Stop Lamp
M19
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Automatic Shutdown 1 and 2
Instrument Cluster
Automatic
Shutdown 3
Horns (Low/High)
– Right
Horns (Low/High)
– Left
Rear Wiper
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
M25
20 Amp
Yellow
M26
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Fuel Pump Motor
Output/Diesel Lift
Pump (Export
Only)
Driver Door Switch
Bank
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Control
Module/Keyless
Entry Module
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission
Controller
M27
M28
Cartridge
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
Mini
Fuse
Description
M29
10 Amp
Red
M30
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Tire Pressure
Monitor – If
Equipped
J1962 Diag
Connector
Backup Lamps
M31
M32
M33
Cartridge
Fuse
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission
Controller
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
Description
CAUTION!
M34
10 Amp
Red
M35
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Park Assist
Module/Climate
Control System
Module/Infra Red
Sensor/Compass
Module
Left Rear
Parklamps
Power Outlet
• When installing the totally integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do
so may allow water to get into the totally integrated
power module and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
M36
M37
M38
Cartridge
Fuse
25 Amp
Natural
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
System Module
All Door Lock
&Unlock
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
You may:
REPLACEMENT BULBS
• Remove fuse #J13 in the Totally Integrated Power
Module (TIPM) labeled Main Ignition-Off Draw (IOD). Interior Bulbs
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
Glove Box Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console
Reading Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamp
Rear Cargo Lamp
Underpanel Courtesy
Lamps
Instrument Cluster
(General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
V26377
214–2
906
103
74
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp – High Intensity
Discharge (HID)
Headlamp (Low Beam)
Headlamp (High Beam)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker Lamps
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
Rear Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
BULB REPLACEMENT
Bulb Number
Service at Authorized Dealer
H11
9005
7444NA
PSX24W
W5W
3057
194
921 (W16W)
W5W
LED (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis- Front Turn Signal
charge (HID) headlamps , when the headlamps are
1. Open the hood.
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
10 seconds, as the system charges.
Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp
connector.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze 4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back
front fog lamp housing.
of the front fog lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in 5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
the housing.
engaged in the slots of the collar.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
4. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
5. Remove/replace bulb(s).
6. Reinstall the socket(s)
7. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear License Lamp
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly. 1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
snap tab to remove the license lamp lens.
2. Pull bulb from socket.
3. Replace bulb.
4. Reinstall lens.
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
25 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
10.4 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
15.4 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
16 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
94 Liters
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
9.9 Liters
14.6 Liters
15.2 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
7
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir –
3.6L Engine
Power Steering Reservoir –
5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you only use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) with friction modifier additive.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT 3,
SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, or MOPAR®
ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
658 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inremind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
formation
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16 000 km) or twelve months,
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serwhichever comes first.
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will • Check engine oil level
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the • Check windshield washer fluid level
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
(5 600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
needed
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other • Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 659 M
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your
vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, offroad or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings,
parking brake function.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
2
32,000
M 660 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
Mileage or time passed
T
(whichever
comes first)
E
N
A
Or Years:
N
Or
Kilometers:
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L engine).**
Replace spark plugs
(5.7L engine).**
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 661 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter, change if using
your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
Change transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 662 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 663 M
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .671
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .668
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .668 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .672
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . .673
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
9
666 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 667
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
668 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 669
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
670 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 671
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS
9
672 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 673
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
674 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
676 INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .222
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .612
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .427
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
INDEX 677
Fluid Level Check . . . .
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . .
Special Additives . . . .
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet
Auxiliary Power Outlet . .
...........
...........
...........
...........
(Power Outlet)
...........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . .
.632
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.632
Warning Light . . . . . . . . .
.633
.459 Brake/Transmission Interlock .
.276 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . .
.276 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .27
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Calibration, Compass . . . . . .
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . .
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.629
.488
.321
.453
.648
.112
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.543
.611
.487
.626
.109
.293
.291
.291
10
678 INDEX
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .606
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.427
.356
.448
.426
.516
.341
.344
.342
.339
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.380
.380
.337
.261
.669
.626
.623
.625
.654
INDEX 679
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.627
.627
.624
.623
.627
.626
.626
.624
.636
.222
.283
.667
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .337
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case. . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.539
.276
.296
.123
.473
.490
.492
10
680 INDEX
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .219
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .318
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .606
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
INDEX 681
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal .
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements . .
Maintenance . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting
Fluid Capacities . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.612
.615
.612
.612
.574
.574
.112
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.542
.542
.539
.543
.543
.542
.448
.654
.112
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . .
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.633
.629
.609
.487
.655
.317
.650
.185
.244
.574
.594
.630
.534
.543
.537
.535
.337
10
682 INDEX
Ethanol . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . .
Requirements . . . . .
Saver Mode . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.536
.543
.534
.319
.333
.537
.536
.534
.534
.337
.654
.539
.543
.337
.337
.545
.641
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
INDEX 683
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener)
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
. . . . .554 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
. . . . .283 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
. . . . .263 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
. . . . .199
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.574
.649
.650
.640
.317
.202
.210
.650
.124
.450
.319
.497
10
684 INDEX
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .500
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
INDEX 685
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .314
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .314
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.613
.608
.658
.314
.672
.193
.193
.193
.536
.339
10
686 INDEX
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
INDEX 687
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .508
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .276
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
10
688 INDEX
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .567
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .571
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .626 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .424
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
INDEX 689
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .59
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Security Against Theft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
10
690 INDEX
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .314
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .424
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
INDEX 691
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .68
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.313
.215
.427
.323
.293
.215
.507
.501
.112
.519
.511
.521
.575
.516
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.511
.513
.512
.575
.519
.507
.524
.313
.673
.514
.520
.523
.501
.502
.515
.577
.518
.559
.518
10
692 INDEX
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.501
.556
.596
.549
.148
.597
.555
.564
.555
.148
.491
.496
.549
.563
.554
.557
.556
.561
.555
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .27
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .263
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .24
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.380
.673
.380
.263
INDEX 693
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
10
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
13WD01-126-AE
Fifth Edition
Durango
Printed in U.S.A.
1588880cv1
13WD01-126-AE Durango
Chrysler 1" gutter 08/27/2013 12:27:42
2013 Durango
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
13WD01-126-AE
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Durango
COVER INCOVER IN
2013 Durango
2013